operation manual

ManualsBrandsPhilips ManualsLED TVs55PFK6949/12

www.philips.com/welcome

40PFK6909

40PFK6949

40PFK6959

40PFK6989

40PFS6909

48PFK6909

48PFK6949

48PFK6959

48PFK6989

48PFS6909

55PFK6909

55PFK6949

55PFK6959

55PFK6989

55PFS6909

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (100 pages)

PAGE 1
Register your product and get support at www.philips.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ - 7.2‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 8‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ - 1.1‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ( ‪1.2 - App gallery‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.3‬ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.4‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪Ambilight+hue - 1.5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪Skype - 1.6‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.7‬ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ - 1.8‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.9‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪EasyLink - 1.10‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪- 2.1‬‬ ‫‪- 2.2‬‬ ‫‪- 2.3‬‬ ‫‪- 2.4‬‬ ‫‪- 2.5‬‬ ‫‪- 2.
PAGE 3
‫‪ - 18.9‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫‪ - 18.10‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫‪ - 18.11‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫‪ - 18.12‬ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪ - 19‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪- 19.1‬‬ ‫‪- 19.2‬‬ ‫‪- 19.3‬‬ ‫‪- 19.4‬‬ ‫‪- 19.5‬‬ ‫‪- 19.6‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪TV Smart‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪TV Smart‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪TV Smart‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪TV Smart‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪ - 20‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪room Multi‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪ - 20.1‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪room Multi‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪ - 20.2‬ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ - 20.
PAGE 4
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺻّﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ Philips Smart LED‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﻒ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪًﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Smart TV‬ﻭﺃﺿﻒ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ‪. Smart TV‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰّﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ MyRemote‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﺇﺻﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ MyRemote‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪iOS‬‬ ‫‪.Android‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪)Help‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪) Keywords‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪) MyRemote app‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪) MyRemote‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1.8‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1.
PAGE 6
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻻﻋﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪)Help‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ( ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪) Keywords‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪or Two player‬‬ ‫‪Game console‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫‪ games‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜّﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1.
PAGE 7
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤّﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ TP Vision Europe B.V‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴؤﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪2.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪2.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫• ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﻔﻒ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪Ambilight‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 15‬ﺳﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‪ .
PAGE 8
‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ‪IEC Coax 75‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻡ ‪.RF‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.DVB-C DVB-T‬‬ ‫‪2.6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪F‬ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ [ ‪]SAT‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪ ، WPS‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ WPS‬ﻭﻋﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ، WEP‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.WPS‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﻴّﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪ WPS‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ‪.WPS‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪3.
PAGE 10
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ DHCP‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻚ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫< ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫< ‪IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪IP‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 11
‫• ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Netflix‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Netflix‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ "ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ" ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰّﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 12
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪4.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪EasyLink HDMI CEC‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻚ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ، EasyLink‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪EasyLink HDMI CEC‬ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪، EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Keywords‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻥﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1.5‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI ARC‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓً ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﻜﻮّﻧﺔ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪Pixel Plus‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ HDMI CEC‬ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ‪Bravia Aquos Link Anynet :‬‬ ‫‪ . Viera Link Simplink Kuro Link Theatre Sync‬ﻻ ﺗُﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪.EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻲ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ، Blu-ray‬ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ .
PAGE 15
‫‪CAM‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ‪CAM‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫ ‪.CAM‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪CAM‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪STB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ SCART‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺘﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻣؤﻗّﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗّﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ .STB‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺪﺓ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷة؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫< ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫< ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫< ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﻓﺮﻕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI ARC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .
PAGE 18
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪، EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Keywords‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ‪.EasyLink HDMI CEC‬‬ ‫‪4.9‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪CVBS -‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺮﻛّﺐ )‬ ‫‪ (CVBS‬ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 19
‫‪4.11‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻّﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪) USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ (USB-HID‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪USB‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪)TV GUIDE‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .
PAGE 20
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪)SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪)EXIT‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ(ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻃًﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 21
‫‪4.14‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻙ ‪ Y‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.CVBS‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮّﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛّﺐ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4.15‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ /Scart‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪CVBS -‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ YPbPr‬ﺃﻭ ‪SCART‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫)ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪)Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 23
‫‪5.2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﻳﺴﺘﻴﻚ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻤ‪/‬ﺎﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﻳﺴﺘﻴﻚ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 24
‫‪ - 1‬‬ ‫‪)SMART TV‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ‪.Smart TV‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ‪، ‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ - 3‬‬ ‫‪)INFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ - 4‬‬ ‫‪)BACK‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪Smart TV‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 25
‫‪6.2‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.3‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴّﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ . AAA-R03-1.
PAGE 26
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪7.1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺗﻀﻢّ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪LIST ‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻔﻀّﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﺮﻱ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫‪1 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫< ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲ‬ ‫"ﺍﻻﺳﻢ" ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Twitter‬ﺃﻭ ‪Facebook‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Keywords‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪)Universal access‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ(‪.
PAGE 29
‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﻋﺐ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫‪1 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺺ ‪.T.O.P‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻧﺺ ‪. T.O.P‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺺ ‪ T.O.P‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺿﻤﻦ ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Keywords‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪)Universal access‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀّﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫‪1 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪iTV‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪iTV‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ‪ HbbTV‬ﺃﻭ ‪iTV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫‪1 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫<ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪DVB-C‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪DVB-C‬ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺪﻡ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ‪ DVB-C‬ﻗﻴﻢ ‪DVB-C‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻌﺮّﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ )ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ( ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.
PAGE 34
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪)Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫< ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫‪ - 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻔًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻭﻏﻴّﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ .
PAGE 35
‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪8.1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪) All‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫‪)OPTIONS‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪)Satellite‬ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .
PAGE 36
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪)OPTIONS‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪)Unlock channel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫‪)LIST‬ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ(‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪)Favourites‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺳﻴﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺒﺪﺀ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .
PAGE 37
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 7‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﺜﺮﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 8‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬‫ﻭﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪8.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ‪ .
PAGE 38
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪Unicable‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Unicable‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Unicable‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Unicable‬ﻛﺒﻼً ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Unicable‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓً ﻓﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﻥٍ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ، Unicable‬ﺳﻴُﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ .
PAGE 39
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Rename‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‬ ‫‪1 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻳﺼﻒ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤؤﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﻘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫"ﺑﺤﺚ" ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪ •.‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳؤﺩِ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺘﻲ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺖ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ، Unicable‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.
PAGE 42
‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ‪ Smart TV‬ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Skype‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻃًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.
PAGE 43
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ )ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 8‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺪٍ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪10.1‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ + ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  ‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫‪)OPTIONS‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪)Change day‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪)Previous day‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ( ﺃﻭ ‪)Today‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ( ﺃﻭ ‪Next‬‬ ‫‪)day‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪.
PAGE 44
‫‪)connections‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪11.2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪11.1‬‬ ‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 45
‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗّﺘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ (STB -‬ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪12.1‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗّﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂﻣؤﻗّﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫‪1 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 46
‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺾ ﺿﻮﺀ ‪LED‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺾ ﺿﻮﺀ ‪LED‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﻠﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻭﺃﻗﺼﺎﻫﺎ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺾ ﺿﻮﺀ ‪LED‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪13.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ .
PAGE 47
‫‪D - 3) bottom /D - Top 3‬‬ ‫‪D - 3) side‬ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ ﻟﺠﻨﺐ(ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ‪ /‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. OK‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﺑﻘِﻪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﺐ ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘُﺒﺪﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪، ‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪13.6‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳُﻨﺼﺢ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺘﻚ ﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﺲ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﺐ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﻧﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺍﻧﺰﻋﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗّﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻳﺸﻜّﻞ ﺧﻄﺮًﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻼً )ﻛﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﺍﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .
PAGE 49
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪14.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Keywords‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪Game‬‬ ‫‪)connect ,console‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒَﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ‪ Philips PTA507 -‬ﺃﻭ ‪ PTA508‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ PTA509‬ﺃﻭ ‪ PTA517‬ﺃﻭ ‪ PTA518‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Photos‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺃﻭ ‪)Music ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪)Videos‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Folders‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ(ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺗﻚ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪15.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Sort‬ﻓﺮﺯ(‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓً ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Music‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Play all‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ + ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.- ‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ . OK‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫‪ .Wi-Fi Miracast‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Miracast‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﻋﺔ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Miracast‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪)Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 53
‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪Pause TV‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﺼﺎﻫﺎ ‪ 90‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)Pause ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ(‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﺒﺮﻫﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﻭﻗﺘًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣؤﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪)Schedule‬ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻏﻴﺎﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺬﻛّﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪17.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ . . .
PAGE 55
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼً ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻻً ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺮّﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰﻓﺸﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪)OPTIONS‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪Delete recording‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Keywords‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪)Record a program‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪.
PAGE 56
‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠّﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪Skype‬ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪18.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪…Skype‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Skype‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Skype‬ﻭﻓﺘﺢ‬‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬‫ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ .
PAGE 57
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ‪Skype‬ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﻢ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ‪ Skype‬ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﺤﺮﻑ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 6‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ . OK‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻞ ‪ Skype‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺒﻠﺖ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Skype‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﺟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻲﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﺠﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ…‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ…‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪)OPTIONS‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪Remove‬‬ ‫)ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ .‬ﺗُﺰﺍﻝ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 60
‫‪18.8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Skype‬ﺳﺘﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﻀﻢّ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‬ ‫ﺭؤﻳﺔ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، Skype‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ‪ Skype‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ‪.Skype‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ‪Skype‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﻨﺸﻐﻼً ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻀﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻤﺤﺖ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺭﻓﻀﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻀﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊﺭﻓﻀﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪.Skype‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ…‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺳﺠّﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Skype‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ، Skype‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺃﻭ‪) ‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Zoom in‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ( ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)Zoom out ‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫‪)Done‬ﺗﻢ( ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪.Skype‬‬ ‫‪18.10‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺠّﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻚ ﻣﻦ ‪ ، Skype‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺗﺴﺠّﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪ . Skype‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴّﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬّﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ…‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫‪)Back‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ Skype‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 63
‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ‪TV Smart‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ ‪2‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻚ‬‫ ‪)App gallery 3‬ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ(‬‫ ‪4‬ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‬‫ ‪6‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬‫‪7 -‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪19.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪TV Smart‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻّﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ Philips Smart LED‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﻒ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪًﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪)Smart TV‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﺍﺀ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ( ‪App gallery‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ‪) App gallery‬ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ( ﻓﻲ ‪Smart TV‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤّﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ YouTube‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﺤﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺲ ﺑﻮﻙ ﺃﻭ ‪ Twitter‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .
PAGE 65
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﻠﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫‪)All broadcasters‬ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺚ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪19.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Smart TV‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪. Smart TV‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ…‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫‪)SMART TV‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫‪)Smart TV‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪.
PAGE 66
‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪room Multi‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Multi room‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮّﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯَﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪20.1‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪room Multi‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Multi Room‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬‬ ‫< ‪Network settings‬‬ ‫< ‪)Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫< ‪)TV network name‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ(‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Keywords‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ‪)Audio language‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺃﻭ ‪)Subtitles‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪21.1‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Keywords‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ‪)Universal access‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ(ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪)Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫< ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫< ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪)Restore Style‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪)Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬٍ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Keywords‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ‪)settings ,Network‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.
PAGE 70
‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩًﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪6 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ(‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 71
‫‪1 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫< ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫< ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫< ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬‫< ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪)Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(ﺃﻭ‬‫‪)Medium‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(ﺃﻭ ‪)Minimum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ(ﺃﻭ ‪)Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬‫< ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺳﻴﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻂ ‪)Personal‬ﺷﺨﺼﻲ(ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ…‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺛﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪ -‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ -‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪّﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .
PAGE 73
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ‪ ،EasyLink‬ﻓﺴﻴُﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺑﺪﺀ ‪EasyLink‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﻳُﺮﺳﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ EasyLink‬ﺃﻭ ‪EasyLink autostart‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ، ( EasyLink‬ﺳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻗﺎﺩﺭًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﺬﻫﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ(‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪ 4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ، ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪. ‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ‪Philips Hue Bridge‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪Philips Hue Bridge‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ — ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺼﻴﻼﺕ ‪.Philips hue‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ‪ < Ambilight‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) ‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ(‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪ ، hue +Ambilight‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺼﻴﻼﺕ ‪ Hue‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪ . Ambilight‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺼﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ 3 -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ OK‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪hue +Ambilight‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ…‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪)Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫<‬ ‫< ‪Ambilight‬‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬‫< ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻀﺎﻑ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪) ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ( ‪. . .‬‬ ‫< ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫< ‪Ambilight‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬‫<ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪)Universal access‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ( ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ ، OPTIONS‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪)Universal access‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪ 3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﻧﻄﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ( ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫< ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫< ﻭﺻﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﻭﺻﻔﻲ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫<‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪. . .
PAGE 79
‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻑﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﻔﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Philips‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟﺒﻠﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪TV /www.philips.com‬‬ ‫‪22.
PAGE 80
‫ ‪ 122‬ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ‪ 48 /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬‫ ‪ 127‬ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ‪ 50 /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬‫ ‪ 140‬ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ‪ 55 /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬‫‪ 164 -‬ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ‪ 65 /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪VHF‬‬ ‫• ‪:DVB‬‬ ‫ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻊ ‪) DVB-T : PxK‬ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ( ‪COFDM‬‬‫‪ K /82K‬؛ ‪) DVB-C‬ﻛﺒﻞ( ‪QAM‬‬ ‫ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻊ ‪) DVB-C ، DVB-T2 : PxT‬ﻛﺒﻠ(؛ ‪QAM‬‬‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪PAL ، SECAM ، NTSC :‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪IEC /ISO (HD /MPEG2 SD :‬‬ ‫‪ 13818-2‬؛) ‪) IEC 14496-10 /ISO (HD /MPEG4 SD‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ) ‪)IEC 13818-3 /ISO‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1080×1920 : PFxxxx9‬
PAGE 81
‫‪22.6‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪MPEG-TS ،MPEG-PS ،AVI ،AVCHD ،GP 3 :‬‬ ‫‪M4V ،MOV (Quicktime )،MKV (Matroska ،MPEG-4 ،‬‬ ‫‪) WMA /WMV /ASF (Windows Media )،M4A ،‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻐﻄ‪/‬ﻔﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪MPEG-4 Part ،MPEG-2 ،MPEG-1 :‬‬ ‫‪WMV9 ،VC-1 )،H264 (MPEG-4 Part 10 AVC ،2‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻐﻄ‪/‬ﻔﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪v2 /v1 (HE-AAC ، AAC :‬‬ ‫‪Dolby Digital Plus ، Dolby Digital ، AMR-NB )،‬‬ ‫‪III/II /Layer I /2/2.5MPEG-1 ،™ Digital Out +DTS 2.0 ،‬‬ ‫)ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ‪ v2 ) WMA ،( MP3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪WMA Pro ،( v9.
PAGE 82
‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪TP Vision‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪23.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﺤﻦ ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 83
Source: http://www.ijg.org/ source code used on the Philips TV, which fall either under the GNU General Public License (the GPL), or the GNU Lesser General Public License (the LGPL), or any other open source license. Instructions to obtain source code for this software can be found in the user manual. libmng (1.0.10) libmng -THE reference library for reading, displaying, writing and examining Multiple-Image Network Graphics.MNG is the animation extension to the popular PNG image-format.
PAGE 84
This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the SquashFS license, which can be found below. Source: http://squashfs.sourceforge.net/ xml paser; Expat is an XML parser library written in C. It is a stream-oriented parser in which an application registers handlers for things the parser might find in the XML document (like start tags). An introductory article on using.
PAGE 85
This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the electric-fence license, which can be found below. Source: www.live555.com system with read-write support. NTFS-3G often uses the FUSE file system interface, so it can run unmodified on many different operating systems. It is runnable on Linux, FreeBSD, NetBSD, OpenSolaris, BeOS, QNX, WinCE, Nucleus, VxWorks, Haiku,MorphOS, and Mac OS X It is licensed under either the GNU General Public License or a proprietary license.
PAGE 86
Provides developer documentation for the utilities used by Linux systems to load and manage kernel modules (commonly referred to as "drivers"). Source: https://modules.wiki.kernel.org/index.php/Main_Page It is intended to conform to the IEEE POSIX P1003.2/ISO 9945.2 Shell and Tools standard. It offers functional improvements over sh for both programming and interactive use. In addition, most sh scripts can be run by Bash without modification. Source: http://www.gnu.org/software/bash/ ncurses (5.
PAGE 87
microhttpd (libmicrohttpd-0.9.9.tar.gz) GNU libmicrohttpd is a small C library that is supposed to make it easy to run an HTTP server as part of another application. The original download site for this software is : http://www.gnu.org/software/libmicrohttpd/This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the LGPL v2.1 license Source: http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/libmicrohttpd/libmicrohttpd0.9.9.tar.gz udhcpc (0.9.
PAGE 88
Libupnp (1.2.1) The Linux* SDK for UPnP* Devices (libupnp) provides developers with an API and open source code for building control points, devices, and bridges that are compliant with Version 1.0 of the UPnP Device Architecture Specification. Source: http://upnp.sourceforge.net/ mDNSResponder (mDNSResponder-320.10.80) The mDNSResponder project is a component of Bonjour, Apple's ease-of-use IP networking initiative:
PAGE 89
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪.Philips‬‬ ‫‪24.1‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻭﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪1 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺗﻔﻀّﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪welcome /www.philips.com‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪24.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺗﻪ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 91
‫‪24.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ‪ /‬ﺇﺻﻼﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺒﻠﺪﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪. support /www.philips.com‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 92
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻤّﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤّﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪TP‬‬ ‫‪ Vision‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺎﺟﻢ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴؤﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻥّ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺠﺮﻭﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪25.
PAGE 93
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮّﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪25.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻜﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﺮﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻴء‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﺠﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Philips‬ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻼﻣﺘﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻼﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ) ‪ ( EMF‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ‪ Philips‬ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗؤﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ‪ .
PAGE 95
‫‪Java‬‬ ‫‪™Digital Out +DTS 2.0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ 5,956,674 :‬ﻭ‪ 5,974,380‬ﻭ‪ 6,487,535‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠّﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ‪DTS‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪DTS‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭ ‪Digital +DTS 2.0‬‬ ‫‪Out‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Inc ،DTS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ © ‪..
PAGE 96
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ ®Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi CERTIFIED‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠّﻠﺔ ﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ‪ . Wi-Fi Alliance‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪™CERTIFIED Miracast‬ﻭ ‪ ™Miracast‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪MHEG‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪") MHEG‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ"( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )"ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ"( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪T CLIENT SYSTEMS ;amp &S‬‬ ‫‪")LIMITED‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ"(‪ .‬ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪75 Ambilight+hue‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪76 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ‪7 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪74 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪76 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪76 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪14 CAM -‬‬ ‫‪16 CI+‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ( ‪32 DVB‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪33 DVB،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪12 DVI،‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ‪61 Skype،‬‬ ‫‪Pause TV‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ‪63 Skype،‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪56 Skype،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪56 Skype،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪60 Skype،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ‪58 Skype،‬‬ ‫‪ Micros
PAGE 98
‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪74‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪73‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪51‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ‪79‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ‪72‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪51‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗّﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪45‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ‪45‬‬ ‫‪ 19‬ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪21‬‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫‪ 19‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ 20‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪16‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪18‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ‪9‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪73‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ‪71‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ
PAGE 99
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ‪73‬‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪39‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪37‬‬ ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ ‪73‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ‪32‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ‪34‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﺘﻴﻜﺴﺖ ‪32‬‬ ‫‪ 83‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪7‬‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 13‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ ،SCART‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ ،YPbPr‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪8‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ‪12‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪8‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪64‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪71‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪73‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ
PAGE 100
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org) Contact information Argentina 0800 444 7749 Buenos Aires 0810 444 7782 België / Belgique 070 700 035 (0,15€/min.) Bosna i Hercegovina 033 941 251 (Lokalni poziv) Brazil 0800 701 0245 Sao Paulo 2938 0245 Бълария 02 4916 273 (Национален номер) Česká republika 228880895 (Místní tarif) Danmark 3525 8314 Deutchland 0180 501 04 69 (0,14€/Min.) Ελλάδα 2111983028 (Εθνική κλήση) España 902 88 10 83 (0,10€ + 0,08€/min.